JP6864658B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a gaming ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a winning ball when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol.

When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round.

In such a gaming machine, in Patent Document 1, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed in parallel, and in a normal state, the effect identification information (in the normal state, corresponding to the first special symbol) It is described that the decorative design) fluctuates, and in the fireworks rush, the effect identification information mainly fluctuates in response to the second special design.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-176585

In such a gaming machine, when shifting from one type of gaming state to another type of gaming state, the player misunderstands the correspondence between the effect identification information (decorative symbol) and the identification information (special symbol). Appropriate control must be taken so as not to give.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing appropriate control in consideration of changes in the gaming state.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine that can play games and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and
The advantageous state includes a specific state in which the variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be executed than in the normal state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and the normal state that can be controlled after the specific state ends. State control means that can control multiple types of game states,
An effect execution means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information of either the first identification information or the second identification information.
With
The effect executing means is
In the normal state, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed in response to the variable display of the first identification information, and in the specific state after the advantageous state controlled based on the variable display of the first identification information, the first 2 In response to the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed, and after the specific state ends, the variable display of the first identification information is supported based on the control to the normal state. Execute variable display of production identification information,
When the variable display of the first identification information is performed when the specific state is controlled to the normal state, the variable display of the effect identification information in the variable display of the first identification information controlled to the specific state is performed. Display the effect identification information so as to show a display result different from the display result of
It is characterized by that.
(Means 1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a first identification information (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Steps S25A and S25B in the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. A state control means (for example, steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a plurality of types of gaming states (for example, a probability variation state, a high base state, and a KT state) including an advantageous state. , The part that executes S25C) and the effect execution means (for example, effect control) that can execute the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The computer 120 includes steps S171 to S173), and the effect executing means executes the variable display of the effect identification information in response to the variable display of the first identification information, and then performs a specific condition (for example, a probability change). Based on the establishment of the state (transition to the state or the high base state), the variable display of the effect identification information is executed in response to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, step 064IWS636, S812, S814 in the effect control CPU 120). After the specific condition is satisfied, a special condition different from the specific condition (for example, the final variation in the low probability / high base state (for example, the 50th variation) is executed) is satisfied. 1 The variable display of the effect identification information is executed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the portion where steps 064IWS641, S812, S813 are executed in the effect control CPU 120), and the first is based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the identification information is performed, the effect identification information is displayed so as to show a display result different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a step. By executing 064IWS642, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (2), the decorative symbol is displayed by switching to the initial appearance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate control in consideration of changes in the gaming state.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed). Part), it is possible to control to a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)) in which the game value is easily given by the special state (for example, steps 064IWS2204 to S2212 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed. The part to be used) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2, the effect executing means has a special image (for example, decorative symbol display area 064IW010) in a display area (for example, decorative symbol display area 064IW010) that executes variable display of effect identification information in response to a transition of a gaming state. , The shutter effect image 064IW017) shown in FIGS. 9-46 may be displayed to reduce the visibility of the effect identification information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the gaming state from occurring at the timing of the transition of the gaming state.

(Means 4) In the means 3, the state control means controls the state control means to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased as compared with the non-predetermined state (for example, a low base state). It is possible, and the effect executing means has a special image (for example, the shutter effect image shown in FIGS. 9-46) for notifying that the game state is changed with high visibility when the state is changed from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state. A special effect (for example, a shutter effect) for displaying 064IW017) is executed, and when the special effect is executed, the effect identification information is not displayed (for example, a portion where step 064IWS820 is executed in the effect control CPU 120). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when shifting from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information. Can be done.

(Means 5) In the means 3 or the means 4, the state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100). It is possible to control to a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)) in which the game value is easily given by the special state (for example, step 064IWS2204 in the game control microcomputer 100). The effect executing means can execute the transition effect (for example, the shutter effect) when it is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and the effect identification information when executing the transition effect. (For example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 064IWS2911) may be configured to perform non-display control. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when the effect identification information is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information. can do.

(Means 6) In any of the means 1 to the means 5, a specific variable display pattern (for example, a second variation) corresponding to the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach effect) for notifying whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state is performed. Step S111A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100 for determining a variable display pattern determining means capable of determining a plurality of types of variable display patterns including patterns # 09, # 12, # 13). And a part that executes the same process as step S111A of the second special symbol process process (step S25B)), the state control means can change the gaming state when the variable display corresponding to the control to the advantageous state ends. Depending on whether or not it is in a predetermined state (for example, a high base state), it is possible to control different gaming states after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes steps 064IWS2209 to S2212). As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot, if the probability variation state or the high base state is before the start of the jackpot game, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), and before the start of the jackpot game. Is controlled to a high probability / high base state (first KT state) when is in a low probability / low base state), and the variable display pattern determining means is after a specific period of the period controlled to the predetermined state. In the variable display corresponding to the control to the advantageous state executed (for example, the final variation in the low probability / high base state (50th variation)), the variable display corresponds to the specific period (for example, 1-49 in the low probability / high base state). A special variable display pattern (for example, the first variable pattern # 07 to # 09 and the second variable pattern # 14 to # 16) whose variable display period is shorter than the specific variable display pattern as compared with the variable display executed in the variable eye). ) May be determined at a high rate (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7 (B) and 9-8 (G)). According to such a configuration, by using the special variable display pattern having a short variable display period, it becomes difficult to start the variable display of the other identification information until the variable display by the special variable display pattern is completed, and the game Appropriate control can be realized in consideration of changes in the state.

(Means 7) In means 5 or 6, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage, and a hold storage stored by the hold storage means. The hold display means (for example, the first hold storage display area 064IW015, the second hold storage display area 064IW016) is provided, and the hold display means can display the effect identification information during the non-display control of the effect identification information. The hold display may be hidden (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 064IWS820). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the hold display in addition to the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 3 to the means 7, the effect executing means is a reduced identification information (for example, a small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol)) in a mode in which the effect identification information is reduced. The variable display can be executed (for example, steps 064IWS206 and S207 are executed in the effect control CPU 120), and the reduced identification information is displayed regardless of whether or not the effect identification information is not displayed (for example). Even if the effect control CPU 120 is configured to execute variable display of the first small symbol and the second small symbol in steps 064IWS206 and S207 regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is being hidden). Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the game situation even during the non-display control of the effect identification information.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 3 to the means 8, the state control means is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol). When the effect execution means ends the non-display control of the effect identification information, the effect control means displays a combination of the effect identification information of the display result different from the specific display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the combination of the effect identification information. By executing step 064IWS642, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (2), the decorative symbol may be displayed by switching to the initial appearance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the control is performed in an advantageous state.

(Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to the means 9, the state control means can shift the gaming state from one type of gaming state to another type of gaming state (for example, from the KT state to the non-KT). The effect execution means starts the non-display control of the effect identification information in response to the transition of the game state (for example, the portion where step 064IWS820 is executed in the effect control CPU 120), and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 064 IWS820). For example, the non-display control of the effect identification information may be terminated (for example, step 064IWS817 in the effect control CPU 120 is executed) based on the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol). According to such a configuration, the non-display control of the effect identification information is executed in response to the transition of the game state, and the effect identification information can be displayed again, so that appropriate control in consideration of the change in the game state can be performed. Can be realized.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 064IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in the feature part 064IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 064IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the stop symbol of a small symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of a shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the switching mode of the display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the switching mode of the display of a decorative pattern in modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing in modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the command analysis processing in the modification 6.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed to open the large winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for gaming effects are provided around the gaming area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". .. In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including hold management), execution of a normal figure game (including hold management), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to send the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 064IW)
Next, the feature unit 064IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 064IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 064IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 064IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 064IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except in the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 064IW is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 064IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 064IW. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 064IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and in the big hit game state, the bottom surface member 064IW108 is provided. By moving the bottom member 064IW108 backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the game ball winning in the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance path 064IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance path 064IW100 is further branched into two paths 064IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 064IW100 is guided to the left side path 064IW102 or the right side path 064IW103. When guided to the left path 064IW102, the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 064IW106. When guided to the right path 064IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 064IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 064IW107.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 064IW102, and when the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is in the open state, a game guided to the guidance path 064IW100. The ball can enter the left path 064IW102 and enter the V region 064IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 064IW100 enters the right side path 064IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 064IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 064IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 064IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 064IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 064IW106 after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 064IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 064IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 064IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 064IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 064IW104 and the discharge region 064IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening entry / discharge mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 9-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 064IW. In this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch (first count switch). In addition to the detection signals from the 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 064IW106 and the discharge area switch 064IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories and the winning door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, transmission is performed to the solenoid 064IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-3 and 9-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-3 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-4 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. May be configured so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched by making the set values "1" to "6" different.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a probabilistic state (state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By making the set values "1" to "6" different, the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 9). As shown in -3 and FIG. 9-4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Fig. 9-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and (B) and 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of losing is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a gaming machine of a type having a setting changing function of 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-5 (A) and 9-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in this feature unit 064IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 064IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 064IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 9-30).

The method of allocating the jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in this example, since the game ball is configured to be controlled to the probabilistic state based on the entry of the game ball into the V region 064IW104, 100% when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. It may be configured so that it becomes one of the probabilistic jackpots with a probability (for example, in FIG. 9-5 (B), it may be configured so that the determination value is not assigned to the 2R normal jackpot).

(Small hit type judgment table)
9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in this feature unit 064IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), in this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be "small hit C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-13), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-14), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, 99/100 is uniformly performed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whether or not it is in the KT state, or whether or not it is in the high base state. It is decided to hit the normal symbol with the probability of. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set, and if the high base flag is set (if the high base state is set), the variable winning ball device 6B Is controlled to open for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is in a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
9-7 to 9-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature unit 064IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, nine types of first variable patterns # 01 to # 12 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol and the second variable pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the first special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-7 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed as the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the first fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 09. Will be decided. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), in the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the first fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 09, which are relatively short at 5 seconds.

When executing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, when it is a KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) other than the final fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state. In, the other variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (C) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in other KT states, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 10 to # 12.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-8 (D). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 064IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By lowering the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 064IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-8 (E) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when a small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 064IW, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 064IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 9-8 (Fig. 9-8). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in F) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined by 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-8 (G) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (G), in the variation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the shutter effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the variation time is relatively short at 5 seconds. 2 Fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16 are determined.

In addition, in this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during other KT states, the first fluctuation pattern # with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds # It is configured to determine 10. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 064IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 064IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the gaming machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-9 (H) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) is executed. Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability / first KT state is out of range, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-9 (J) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (J), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (J), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 9-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-9 (J). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-10, in this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-10, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 9-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot"). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 064IW109 is driven and V. The area opening / closing plate 064IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 064IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When the game ball enters the V area 064IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 064IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 It is a period from when the closed state is controlled again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, using FIG. 9-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 064IW109 is driven and V. The region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is controlled to be in the open state for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 064IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 064IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 9-12 to 9-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 9-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 9-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 9-14 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIGS. 9-12 (2) show the opening patterns. 9-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1). As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A). , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. is there. Therefore, in the feature unit 064IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 064IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 064IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared with the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types are configured to be provided. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 064IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 064IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 064IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 064IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, and FIG. 9-12 (1) to FIGS. As shown in 9-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 064IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 to 9-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 064IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
9-15 and 9-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-15, the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is out of alignment. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 064IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) that specifies that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-15 and 9-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 064IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 064IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 064IWS53A), decrement the value of the first hold storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first hold storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 064IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 064IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 064IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 064IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 064IWS69A without performing the processing after step 064IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 064IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 064IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 064IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 064IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 064IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 064IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 064IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 064IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 064IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 064IWS63A), and step 064IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 064IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 064IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a hit determination random number (a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 064IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 064IWS65A). Step 064IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 064IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 064IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 9-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 064IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 064IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 064IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 064IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 064IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 064IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 064IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 064IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS75A.

In this feature unit 064IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / 1st KT state) and 50 times of variation display is executed. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 064IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 064IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in steps 064IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

Then, in step 064IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 064IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 064IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 064IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is first set with a special figure time reduction flag or a lighting extension flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 064IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and the lighting extension flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (). (See FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If neither the special figure time reduction flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 9-7 as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in (A) is selected (step 064IWS1701A).

If the special figure time reduction flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first variation pattern table for KT as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. A variable pattern table for special symbols is selected (step 064IWS1702A). In step 064IWS1702A, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 9-7 (B) if the lighting extension flag is set (ie, if the last variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed). Select the 1st special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and 50th variation shown. On the other hand, if the special symbol time reduction flag is set, the others shown in FIG. 9-7 (C). Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 064IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-7 is used (step 064IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 064IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 064IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 064IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 064IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 064IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 064IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 064IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 064IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1123A). Step 064IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 064IWS1135A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is in progress (step 064IWS1125A). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed is confirmed, for example, whether or not the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to processing other than the second special symbol normal processing. It can be judged by. If the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 064IWS1126A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 064IWS1127A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS1128A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1129A).

When it is determined as Y in step 064IWS1125A and Y is determined in step 064IWS1126A, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processes of steps 064IWS1127A to S1129A, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is performed. If the variation display of the second special symbol is started before the end of, the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variation display of the second special symbol to end the low probability / high base state. However, it is configured to shift to a low probability / low base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 064IWS1130A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 064IWS1131A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 064IWS1132A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 064IWS1133A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 064IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 064IWS1130A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 064IWS1131A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 064IWS1132A, N in step 064IWS1133A), the CPU 103 sends the first compulsory symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 064IWS1134A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 064IWS1135A).

By executing the processes of steps 064IWS1130A to S1134A, in this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example) is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 064IWS1134A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 064IWS1133A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 064IWS1120A, the processing of steps 064IWS1121A to S1135A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 064IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 064IWS1132A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 064IWS2010A). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a probability change storage flag indicating that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probability change state (step 064IWS2011A). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set (step 064IWS2012A). If the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag indicating that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the high base state (step 064IWS2013A).

By executing the processes of steps 064IWS2010A to S2013A, in this example, it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probability change state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 064IWS2014A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 064IWS2015A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS2016A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2017A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but by executing the processes of steps 064IWS69A to S74A, the first special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined that the low probability / first KT state is terminated when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated, and the processing of steps 064IWS2014A to S2017A is executed, so that the low probability / first when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated. The right-handed display 26 is turned off while the 1KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered. However, as already described, by executing the processes of steps 064IWS1125A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability / first KT state, and before ending the variation display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the low probability / high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started. ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 064IWS2018A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 064IWS1134A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 064IWS2019A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 064IWS2020A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 064IWS2021A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS2022A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2023A). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2032A.

By executing the processes of steps 064IWS2022A and S2023A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 064IWS2019A), the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag if it is set (step 064IWS20204A). In this example, the probabilistic memory flag and the high base memory flag are set by executing the processes of steps 064IWS2010A to S2013A, and it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probabilistic state or the high base state. However, in the case of deriving and displaying the out-of-order symbol or the small hit symbol, the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag are reset by executing the process of step 064IWS2024A.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 064IWS2025A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2026A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 064IWS2027A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 064IWS2031A). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2032A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 064IWS2032A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. May be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 064IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 064IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 064IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step 064IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 064IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 064IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 064IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 064IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 064IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 064IWS69B without performing the processing after step 064IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 064IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 064IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 064IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 064IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 064IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 064IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 064IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 064IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 064IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 064IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 064IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 064IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 064IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a hit determination random number (a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 064IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 064IWS65B). Step 064IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 064IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 064IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 9-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 064IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 064IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 064IWS70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 064IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 064IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 064IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 064IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 064IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS75B.

Then, in step 064IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 064IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 064IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 064IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 064IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag or the lighting extension flag is set. If neither the special figure time reduction flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 9- as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in 8 (D) is selected. If the special figure time reduction flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of fluctuations. Correspondingly, as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, any of the fluctuation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 9-8 (E) to 9-9 (J) is selected. .. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-8 (E). Select, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-8 (F) for the 2nd to 49th variations, and select the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-8 (G) for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-9 (H). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-9 (J) is selected. The CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-8 (G) based on the lighting extension flag being set. You may do so.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 064IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 064IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 064IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1123B). Step 064IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 064IWS1135B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is in progress (step 064IWS1125B). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed is confirmed, for example, whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to processing other than the first special symbol normal processing. It can be judged by. If the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 064IWS1126B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 064IWS1127B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS1128B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1129B).

When it is determined as Y in step 064IWS1125B and Y is determined in step 064IWS1126B, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the first special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processes of steps 064IWS1127B to S1129B, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is performed. If the variation display of the first special symbol is started before the end of, the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variation display of the first special symbol to end the low probability / high base state. However, it is configured to shift to a low probability / low base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 064IWS1130B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 064IWS1131B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 064IWS1132B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 064IWS1133B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step 064IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 064IWS1130B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 064IWS1131B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 064IWS1132B, N in step 064IWS1133B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to (step 064IWS1134B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 064IWS1135B).

By executing the processes of steps 064IWS1130B to S1134B, in this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 064IWS1134B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 064IWS1133B), but in this case, the first special symbol is executed. Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 064IWS1120B, the processing of steps 064IWS1121B to S1135B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 064IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 064IWS1132B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss or a small hit, is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (on the right side of the game area). In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time-saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
9-23 and 9-24 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 064IWS2010B). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the probability change storage flag (step 064IWS2011B). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set (step 064IWS2012B). If the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag (step 064IWS2013B).

By executing the processes of steps 064IWS2010B to S2013B, in this example, it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probability change state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 064IWS2014B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 064IWS2015B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS2016B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2017B).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but by executing the processes of steps 064IWS69B to S74B, the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined that the low probability / first KT state is terminated when the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated, and the processing of steps 064IWS2014B to S2017B is executed, so that the low probability / first when the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated. The right-handed display 26 is turned off while the 1KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered. However, as already described, by executing the processes of steps 064IWS1125B to S1129B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability / first KT state, and before ending the variation display. When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the low probability / high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started. ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 064IWS2018B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 064IWS1134B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 064IWS2019B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 064IWS2020B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 064IWS2021B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS2022B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2023B). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2032B.

By executing the processing of step 064IWS2022B and S2023B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 064IWS2019B), the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag if it is set (step 064IWS20204B). In this example, the probabilistic memory flag and the high base memory flag are set by executing the processes of steps 064IWS2010B to S2013B, and it is once recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the probabilistic state or the high base state. However, in the case of deriving and displaying the out-of-order symbol or the small hit symbol, the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag are reset by executing the process of step 064IWS2024B.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 064IWS2025B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2026B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 064IWS2027B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 064IWS2028B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS2029B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 064IWS2030B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 064IWS2031B). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2032B.

By executing the processing of step 064IWS2029B and S2030B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 064IWS2028B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 064IWS2032B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 064IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 064IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 064IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 064IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 064IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 064IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-26 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 064IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 064IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 064IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 064IWS2504).

In this feature unit 064IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 is played. The game is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 064IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 064IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 064IW106 is in the ON state (step 064IWS2404). If the V area switch 064IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 064IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 064IW104. (Step 064IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 064IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 064IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 064IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 064IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 064IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the large winning door. It is stopped and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 064IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 064IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 064IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 064IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 064IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 064IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 064IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 064IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 064IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 064IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 064IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 064IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 064IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot (step 064IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 064IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 064IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 064IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2219. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT). It will be controlled by the state).

If it is not a 10R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 064IWS2209). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 064IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag or the high base storage flag is set (step 064IWS2210). If neither the probability variation memory flag nor the high base memory flag is set (that is, when the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the low probability / low base state (normal state)), the CPU 103 has a high base. The flag is set and the state shifts to the high base state (step 064IWS2211). Then, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 064IWS2212). On the other hand, if the probability variation storage flag or the high-base storage flag is set, the CPU 103 executes only the processing of step 064IWS22112 without shifting to the processing of step 064IWS2211, sets the special figure time reduction flag, and enters the KT state. Transition (step 064IWS2212). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2219.

By executing the processes of steps 064IWS2209 to S2212, if the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained and the gaming state at the end of the variation display is the low probability / low base state (normal state), the jackpot game is in progress. If the game ball enters the V region 064IW104, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). On the other hand, if the game state at the end of the variable display is one of the KT states (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state, low probability / high base state), the V region during the jackpot game. If the game ball enters the 064IW104, it will be controlled to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 064IWS2213). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 064IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 064IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 064IWS2214), and further sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 064IWS2215). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2219. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, or if the gaming state at the end of the fluctuation display is a low probability / low base state (normal state) and a 2R probability variation jackpot, simply setting the high base flag will result in a high base. The count counter is not set. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 064IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 064IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 064IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 064IWS70A and step 064IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 064IWS2216), and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 064IWS2217). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 064IWS2218). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2219. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag (step 064IWS2219). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 064IWS2220).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 064IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 064IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 064IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 064IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 064IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 064IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 064IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 064IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 064IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 064IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 064IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 064IWS2028B to S2030B). (See), the processing of steps 064IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 064IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 064IW will be described. FIG. 9-30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 064IW. First, in the feature unit 064IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-30, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high base state) after the jackpot game ends. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2206, S2213 to S2215). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 064IWS2216 to S2218).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature 064IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 9-30, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2206, S2213 to S2215). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 064IWS2216 to S2218).

As shown in FIG. 9-30, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2206, S2213 to S2215). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 064IWS2216 to S2218). In this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 9-30 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 064IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 9-30, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 064IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 9-5 (D) and 9-5 (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 064IWS2204 to S2206, S2213 to S2215). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 064IWS2216 to S2218).

In addition, in FIG. 9-30, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 2R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-30, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-30, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-30, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 064IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 064IW. In FIG. 9-31, the processing of steps 064IWS201 to S205 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S75 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first small symbol process process (step 064IWS206). In this example, by executing the first small symbol process process of step 064IWS206, in the image display device 5, the first small symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second small symbol process process (step 064IWS207). In this example, by executing the second small symbol process process of step 064IWS207, in the image display device 5, the second small symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display is executed.

In this example, the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) have a smaller display size than the decorative symbol and are difficult to see as compared with the decorative symbol. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-ream is executed, the re-variation is executed once or multiple times to execute the variation display again after the pseudo-ream chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol. However, with regard to the variation display of the small symbol, the variation display of the small symbol is continuously executed without the temporary stop display or the re-variation even when the pseudo-ream is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, a shutter effect of displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is not displayed when the shutter effect is performed. Although it is a display, the variable display of small symbols is continuously executed so as to be visible even during the execution of the shutter effect. In addition, the decorative symbol and the hold display are hidden during the execution of the shutter effect, but the first small symbol and the second small symbol are hidden regardless of whether the decorative symbol or the hold display is hidden. Fluctuation display is executed.

9-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the stop symbol of the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol). As shown in FIGS. 9-32, in this example, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "333" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. To. Further, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "777" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-32, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "765" (small hit symbol) is used as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. Is stopped and displayed. Further, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination (small hit symbol) of "765" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-32, in this example, when the non-reach is out of the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination (non-reach) of "123" is used as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. The out-of-order symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, when the reach is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination (reach-out symbol) of "323" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. Further, when the non-reach is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination (non-reach out-of-reach symbol) of "567" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol. Further, when the reach is out of the variation display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination of "767" (the out-reach symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Next, the process of step 064IWS208 is the same as the process of step S76 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 064IWS209). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 064IWS209, the image display device 5 has a special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol). The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of.

In this example, when the pseudo-ream is executed, the re-variation is executed once or multiple times to execute the variation display again after the pseudo-ream chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol. However, regarding the variable display of the fourth symbol, even when the pseudo-ream is executed, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously executed without the temporary stop display or the re-variation. Further, in this example, as will be described later, a shutter effect of displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is not displayed when the shutter effect is performed. Although it is a display, the variable display of the fourth symbol is continuously executed so as to be visible even during the execution of the shutter effect. In addition, the decorative symbol and the hold display are hidden during the execution of the shutter effect, but the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed regardless of whether the decorative symbol or the hold display is hidden or not. To.

Next, the process of step 064IWS210 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

(Command analysis processing)
9-33 to 9-36 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 064IWS205). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 064IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 064IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 064IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 064IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 064IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 064IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 064IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 064IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 064IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 064IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 064IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 064IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 064IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 064IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 064IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 064IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 064IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 064IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 064IWS624 and S627, the right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 064IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 064IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 064IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 064IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 064IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 sets a right-handed lighting flag indicating that right-handed lighting is being performed (step 063IWS634), and right. Control is performed to start lighting the beating notification LED 37 (step 064IWS635). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to replace the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 with the same symbol as the second small symbol and display it (step 064IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end specification command (step 064IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 resets the right-handed lighting flag (step 063IWS638), and the effect control CPU 120 is the right-handed notification LED 37. Is controlled to end the lighting of (step 064IWS639).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "333") is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol in the image display device 5 (). Step 064IWS640). Unless the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls to replace the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 with the same symbol as the first small symbol and display it. (Step 064IWS641). If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 initially rolls the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 (in this example, the symbol of "135". The display is controlled by replacing with (combination) (step 064IWS642).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls (step 064IWS643).

In this example, by executing the process of step 064IWS643, the value of the prize ball counter is reset at the timing when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and the left-handed operation is started. Therefore, in this example, when the right-handed lighting start designation command is first received and the right-handed operation is started, the counting of the value of the prize ball counter is started, and the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and left-handed. The counting of the value of the prize ball counter will be completed at the timing when the operation is started.

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 064IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the blue background image) (step 064IWS645). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 064IWS646).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 064IWS647), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, The display is controlled by the green background image) (step 064IWS648). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 064IWS649), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 064IWS650).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 064IWS651), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the yellow background image) (step 064IWS652). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 064IWS653), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 064IWS654).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 064IWS655), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the red background image) (step 064IWS656). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 064IWS657), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 064IWS658).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 064IWS659), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 064IWS660). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to update the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 064IWS661).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 064IWS662), it is confirmed whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 064IWS663). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 064IWS664). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to update the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 064IWS665).

By executing the process of steps 064IWS662 to S665, in this example, the special winning opening is won in the small hitting game state during the second KT state, except when the winning opening is won during the big hitting game. The prize ball number display is also updated when

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 064IWS666). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 064IWS611.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 064IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step 064IWS205). In step 064IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 064IWS812). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right-handed lighting is not being notified and the left-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Check if this is the case (step 064IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 12. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. If the variation display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 064IWS815.

If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, when right-handed notification is in progress and right-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the second special symbol. Check if this is the case (step 064IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. If the variation display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 064IWS815.

By executing the processing of steps 064IWS812 to S814, in the feature unit 064IW, when the left-handed operation is in progress, the image display device 5 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. Is executed, and when the right-handed operation is in progress, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the right-handed operation is being performed, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the left-handed operation is being performed. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 064IWS815). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 064IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 064IWS815. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 064IWS816). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to restart the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display (step 064IWS817).

By executing the process of steps 064IWS815 to S817, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the shutter effect is performed on the way. 2 If the variable display of the special symbol is not started, after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the shutter effect is finished at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the decorative symbol and the hold display are displayed. The display resumes. Further, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is not started in the middle, the second After the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the shutter effect (step 064IWS818). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not any of the second fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16 is specified. If it is a variation pattern for the shutter effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the shutter effect (step 064IWS819). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the decorative symbol and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 064IWS820).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 064IWS821).

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 064IWS920). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right-handed lighting is not being notified and the left-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 is set as the first small stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the first small symbol determined in the symbol process process (step 064IWS206) is determined (step 064IWS921). If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, when right-handed notification is in progress and right-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 uses the second small as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the second small symbol determined in the symbol process process (step 064IWS207) is determined (step 064IWS922).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 064IWS923). To check whether the variation display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 064IWS927 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 064IWS923), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 064IWS924).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 064IWS925). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 064IWS927 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 064IWS925), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 064IWS926).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Selects a process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 064IWS927).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 064IWS927 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 064IWS928). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 064IWS929). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

However, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed, the decorative symbol is hidden, so that the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed (small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol)). The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed).

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 064IWS929 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 064IWS927. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 064IWS929 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 064IWS927. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 064IWS930). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 064IWS931).

(Variable display during production processing)
9-39 and 9-40 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 064IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 064IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 064IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 064IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 064IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 064IWS8106). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right-handed lighting is not being notified and the left-handed operation is being performed), has the effect control CPU 120 received the first symbol confirmation designation command? Whether or not (for example, whether or not the first confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 064IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 064IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 064IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 064IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 064IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 064IWS8110).

If the right-handed lighting flag is set in step 064IWS8106 (that is, if right-handed notification is in progress and right-handed operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 issues the second symbol confirmation designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the command has been received (for example, whether or not the second confirmation command reception flag has been set) (step 064IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 064IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 064IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 064IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 064IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 064IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 064IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 064IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the shutter effect. (Step 064IWS8115). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 064IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 064IWS8115. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display during execution is a jackpot variation (step 064IWS8116). If it is not a big hit fluctuation (that is, if it is a missed fluctuation or a small hit fluctuation), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 064IWS8117). To check whether the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, check whether the right-handed lighting flag is set. It can be judged by doing.

If the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has started. (Step 064IWS8118). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol has been started can be determined by confirming, for example, whether or not the variation pattern command that specifies the second variation pattern # 01 to # 34 has been received. If the variation display of the second special symbol has not been started, the process proceeds to step 064IWS8122 as it is.

The variable display of the decorative symbol being executed does not correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. If it is executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol has been started (step 064IWS8119). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol has been started can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the variation pattern commands that specify the first variation patterns # 01 to # 12 have been received. If the variation display of the first special symbol has not been started, the process proceeds to step 064IWS8122 as it is.

When the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol is started (Y in step 064IWS8118), or during execution. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the first special symbol is started (Y in step 064IWS8119), the effect control CPU 120 , The image display device 5 controls to end the shutter effect (step 064IWS8120). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to restart the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display (step 064IWS8121).

By executing the process of step 064IWS8115 to S8121, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the shutter effect is performed on the way. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is started, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the middle, the variation display is performed. The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 064IWS8122). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 064IWS8123). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 064IWS8124).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer timed out in step 064IWS8122 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 064IWS8123 and S8124 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking fluctuation or slight fluctuation.

In this example, the image display device 5 also executes the variable display of the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol, but the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer When the update is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol is also performed. It will continue to run. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these small symbols (first small symbol, The variation display of the second small symbol) and the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-41 and 9-42 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 064IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 064IWS9707. In this feature unit 064IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 064IWS9706. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 064IWS9704 is performed. The process proceeds to step 064IWS9707 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 064IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 064IWS9719. In this feature unit 064IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 064IWS9718. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 064IWS9704 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 064IWS9719 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 064IWS9703). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 064IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 064IWS9703. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step 064IWS9705 as it is. That is, in this example, since it is controlled not to display the decorative symbol during the execution of the shutter effect, it is controlled not to perform the process of confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 064IWS9704.

If the shutter effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to confirm and display the stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being displayed. (Step 064IWS9704). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 064IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 064IWS9704. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 064IWS9704 (Y in step 064IWS9705), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 064IWS9706).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 064IWS9707). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 064IWS9708).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 064IWS9709). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 064IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 064IWS9709. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 064IWS9710). When the shutter effect is finished in step 064IWS9710, the display is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol after the jackpot game is finished, the decorative symbol and the hold display are displayed. It will be resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 064IWS9711). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display based on the current value of the prize ball number counter (step 064IWS9712). ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 064IWS9713). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 064IWS9714), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 064IWS9715).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 064IWS9716).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 064IWS9704 (N in step 064IWS9705), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 064IWS9704 (Y in step 064IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 064IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 064IWS9719). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 064IWS9720).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 064IWS9721). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 064IWS9722), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 064IWS9723).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 064IWS9724).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 064IWS9704 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 064IWS9705 and N in step 064IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 064IWS9725).

(Production processing during big hit)
9-43 is a flowchart showing the big hit middle effect process (step S176) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not any of the jackpot end designation command reception commands has been received (for example, whether or not any of the jackpot end designation command reception flags have been set). (Step 064IWS2901). If any of the jackpot end designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 064IWS2902), and the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) are controlled (step 064IWS2903).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 064IWS2904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 064IWS2905). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and phone number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 064IWS2906).

If any of the jackpot end designation commands is received (Y in step 064IWS2901), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot is terminated (step 064IWS2907). If the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot is to be completed, the process proceeds to step 064IWS2910. Unless it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 064IWS2908). When ending the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 064IWS2909).

When the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation big hit is ended (Y in step 064IWS2907), or when the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 064IWS2909), that is, the current big hit game is finished. When later controlled to the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the shutter effect (step 064IWS2910). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the decorative symbol and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 064IWS2911).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the ending effect (step 064IWS2912). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 064IWS2913), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 064IWS2914). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 064IWS2915). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 064IWS2916), and ends the big hit middle effect process.

(Ending production processing)
9-44 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 064IWS951). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 064IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 064IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 064IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 064IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 064IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 064IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 064IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 064IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot ends (step 064IWS958). If the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot is to be completed, the process proceeds to step 064IWS962. Unless it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 064IWS959). When ending the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 064IWS960). If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set, the process proceeds to step 064IWS962.

When the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot is not finished (N in step 064IWS959), or when neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (N in step 064IWS960), that is, If the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 0645IWS961). However, in this case, only the prize ball number display is deleted, and the prize ball number counter is not reset. Therefore, the game state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the right-handed operation is performed. The value of the prize ball counter is maintained until the end of.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 064IWS962). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 064IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 064IWS962. Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 064IWS963). When the shutter effect is finished in step 064IWS963, the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed when the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 064IWS964).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 064IW will be described. First, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 9-45 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 064IWS2022A and S2022B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2023A, S2023B, S635). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 064IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 064IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 064IWS2029B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps 064IWS2030B and S635). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (2), the right-handed display 064IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (3), the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game. The striking notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right-strike display 064IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, an effect mode of the shutter effect will be described. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the shutter effect. In addition, in FIG. 9-46, the effect screen changes in the order of (T1), (T2), (T3), and so on. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 for displaying the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the first small symbol on the left, middle, and right. A first small symbol display area 064IW011 and a second small symbol display area 064IW012 for displaying the second small symbol on the left, middle, and right are provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol display area 064IW013 for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol display for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Area 064IW014 is provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 064IW015 for displaying the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage are displayed. 2 Hold storage display area 064IW016 is provided.

In this example, the case where the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 064IW013,014 provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 is shown, but it is limited to such an aspect. Absent. For example, a light emitting body such as an LED provided separately from the image display device 5 may be blinked, turned on or off to display light emission, and a variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-46 (T1), when the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), the second small symbol display area 064IW012 corresponds to the start. The variable display of the second small symbol on the left, middle and right is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle and right is started in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 064IW014. Is started. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T2), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 064IW012, and the decorative symbol is confirmed in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 064IW014. In FIG. 9-46 (T2), the second small symbol, the decorative symbol, and the out-of-order symbol as the stop symbol of the fourth symbol are confirmed and displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation (50th variation) of the low probability / high base state (first KT state). In this case, based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command for specifying the fluctuation pattern including the shutter effect, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T3), the image display device 5 displays the characters "preparing for big hit". When the shutter effect image 064IW017 including the above is displayed so as to be closed from the left and right, the shutter effect is started (see step 064IWS819). In this example, it is assumed that the second fluctuation pattern # 16 is determined based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is the jackpot fluctuation as the final fluctuation.

Further, when the shutter effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T3), the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 are erased, and the first reserved storage display area 064IW015 and the second The hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 064IW016 is erased (see step 064IWS820). However, even if the shutter effect is started and the decorative symbol is erased, the display of the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 064IW012 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T3), the second small symbol is displayed. In the area 064IW012, the variation display of the second small symbol on the left, middle, and right is started. Further, the display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 064IW014 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T3), the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 064IW014.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T4), the shutter effect is continuously executed during the variable display of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol. Then, when the fluctuation time is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T5), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 064IW012, and the fourth symbol display area 064IW014 is displayed. 4 Stop symbol of symbol The symbol is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 9-46 (T5), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T5), in the image display device 5, the right-handed image 064IW018 prompting the right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing the firing operation is superimposed and displayed on the shutter effect image 064IW017. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T5), in the image display device 5, the gate passage promotion image 064IW019 that promotes the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is superimposed and displayed on the right-handed image 064IW018.

Next, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T6), the right-handed image 064IW018 and the gate passing promotion image 064IW019 are displayed in the image display device 5. The shutter effect ends when the image is hidden by moving so as to open from the center to the left and right (see step 064IWS9710). Then, when the shutter effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (T7), a character display such as "big hit" and a round number display are displayed, and a prize ball number display 064IW020 is displayed. The effect is such that the jackpot game is started immediately after the shutter effect is completed. Then, after that, when the jackpot game is finished and the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-46, the case where the final fluctuation (50th fluctuation) in the low probability / high base state (first KT state) is the big hit fluctuation is shown, but the final fluctuation is the missed fluctuation or the small hit. Even in the case of fluctuation, the shutter effect is executed in the same manner as in FIGS. 9-46 (T3) and (T4). Then, after the variation time is finished, when the variation display of the next decorative symbol is started, the shutter effect is terminated and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed (see steps 064IWS816, S817). However, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, if the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the middle, the variation display is performed. The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the deviation variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the middle, the variation display is performed. The shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is resumed (see steps 064IWS8115 to S8121).

Next, a mode for switching the display of the decorative pattern will be described. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of switching the display of the decorative symbol. Although the description is omitted in FIGS. 9-47, the image display device 5 is provided with a fourth symbol display area for displaying the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol is also displayed (FIG. 9-47). 9-46).

In this example, during the period when the game state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the left-handed operation is performed, the left middle right in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative pattern of is displayed. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state) of the game state and a big hit is obtained, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the left column of FIG. 9-47 (1) is displayed. As shown, in the first small symbol display area 064IW011, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol, and in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the first special symbol. The same jackpot symbol as the 1 small symbol is confirmed and displayed. After that, when the big hit game is started, the right-handed operation is performed, so that the display is switched to the display corresponding to the second special symbol in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 (see step 064IWS636), and the big hit game is finished. Then, for example, when shifting to the second KT state, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (1), the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 has a second small decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the symbol display area 064IW012 is displayed.

In this example, when the second KT state is controlled at the end of the jackpot game, the shutter effect is executed (see step 064IWS2910). In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, a shutter in which a character display such as "small hit RUSH is being prepared" is displayed instead of the character display of "preparing for big hit" in FIGS. 9-46 (T3) and (T4). It suffices to perform the effect of closing.

Further, the left column of FIG. 9-47 (2) shows the display state of the decorative symbol immediately before the end of the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state. In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-47 (2), the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 has a second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 064IW012 is displayed. Next, when the final variation (50th variation) is completed and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state), the state shifts to the state in which the left-handed operation is performed. It switches to a state in which the same symbol as the first small symbol displayed in the first small symbol display area 064IW011 is displayed as a decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol (see step 064IWS641).

However, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (2), if a big hit is accidentally made in the variable display of the first special symbol that was executed last time last time, it is displayed in the first small symbol display area 064IW011. The first small symbol may remain the jackpot symbol. In such a case, if the symbol is switched to the same symbol as the first small symbol of the decorative symbol as it is, the player may be misunderstood that the jackpot has occurred even though it is not the case where the jackpot has occurred. .. Therefore, in this example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (2), the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first small symbol when the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state is completed. If it is in the state of being set, the decorative symbol is not switched to the same symbol as the first small symbol, but is configured to be switched to the initial result (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "135"). (See step 064IWS642).

Further, the left column of FIG. 9-47 (3) is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state, and when the right-handed operation is performed, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The case where it becomes a big hit is shown. In this case, at the time of the stop display of the big hit symbol, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-47 (3), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 064IW012. In the decorative symbol display area 064IW010, the same jackpot symbol as the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. After that, since the state in which the right-handed operation is being performed continues, the state in which the same symbol as the second small symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol continues, and even when the jackpot game is completed, FIG. 9-47 (Fig. 9-47) As shown in the right column of 3), the same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display area 064IW012 as a decorative symbol continues in the decorative symbol display area 064IW010 corresponding to the second special symbol. Is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47, a case is shown in which the small symbol on the sub-symbol side of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is always displayed. Not limited. For example, it is not necessary to always display the small symbol on the sub symbol side of the first small symbol and the second small symbol, and it may be configured to be displayed only during the symbol confirmation period of the sub symbol. With such a configuration, the effect display corresponding to the main symbol (reach effect, etc.) can be obtained by omitting the display of unnecessary information while the main symbol of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is fluctuating. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to.

In this example, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol) start the variable display based on the reception of the variable pattern command. In addition, the decorative symbol becomes a temporary stop state (sway fluctuation state) before the end of the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first Based on the reception of the compulsory symbol confirmation designation command and the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command), the confirmation stop state is set. On the other hand, the small symbol is in the fixed stop state based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command without going through the temporary stop state (sway fluctuation state). Further, for the decorative pattern, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the variable display result by executing the revival effect after the temporary stop state of the reach is off.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed will be described. FIG. 9-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 9-48 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120A, step 064IWS1120A, See step 064IWS1133A Y).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 9-48 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 064IWS1133A and step 064IWS1134A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120A, step 064IWS1120A, See step 064IWS1132A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 9-48 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120B, step 064IWS1120B, See step 064IWS1133B Y).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 9-48 (E). When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 064IWS1133B and step 064IWS1134B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (F). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120B, step 064IWS1120B, See step 064IWS1132B N).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 9-49, the processing of steps 064IWS1120A to S1132A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-19, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 064IWS1133A shown in FIG. 9-19 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1134A as it is, and transmits the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 064IWS1134A). In FIG. 9-49, the process of step 064IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-19.

FIG. 9-50 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 9-50, the processing of steps 064IWS1120B to S1132B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-22, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 064IWS1133B shown in FIG. 9-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1134B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 064IWS1134B). In FIG. 9-50, the process of step 064IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-22.

FIG. 9-51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the first modification.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-51 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (see N in step 064IWS1132A, see step 064IWS1134A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120A, step 064IWS1120A, See step 064IWS1132A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-51 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 064IWS1132B and step 064IWS1134B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120B, step 064IWS1120B, See step 064IWS1132B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 9-52, the processing of steps 064IWS1120A to S1131A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-19, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 064IWS1132A and S1133A shown in FIG. 9-19 is used. Instead, it includes the process of step 064IWS1132C.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1134A). In FIG. 9-52, the process of step 064IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-19.

FIG. 9-53 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 9-53, the processing of steps 064IWS1120B to S1131B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-22, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 064IWS1132B and S1133B shown in FIG. 9-22 is used. Instead, it includes the processing of step 064IWS1132D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1134B). In FIG. 9-53, the process of step 064IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-22.

FIG. 9-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-54 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120A, step 064IWS1120A, See step 064IWS1132C Y).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 064IWS1132C and step 064IWS1134A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-54 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 064IWS1120B, step 064IWS1120B, See step 064IWS1132D Y).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 064IWS1132D and step 064IWS1134B).

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 9-30), but 50 times. When 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated when the fluctuation display is finished and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, it is forcibly stopped. This makes it possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Further, in particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to a KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in a normal state (low probability / low base state), a second start winning opening that is easy to win a start can be obtained. It is also possible to make a start prize and display the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and at the same time, let the first start prize opening win the start prize and display the change of the first special symbol. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification example 3)
In addition, the feature unit 064IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 9-48) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 9-55 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 9-19. In FIG. 9-55, the processing of steps 064IWS1120B to S1130B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-22, but in the modified example 3, the determination processing of steps 064IWS1131B to S1133B shown in FIG. 9-22 is performed. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 064IWS1130B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 9-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 9-56 (A) and 9-56 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 9-48 (A) and 9-48 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-56 (D) and 9-56 (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit. When it is displayed, similarly to FIGS. 9-48 (D) and 9-48 (F), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 9-48 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 9-48 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-56, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), it is forcibly missed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), it fluctuates. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 9-57 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 9-57, the processes of steps 064IWS1120A to S1133A are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variation jackpot nor the 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 064IWS1133A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 064IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1134A). The process of step 064IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-19.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 064IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 9-58 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIG. 9-58, the processes of steps 064IWS1120B to S1133B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-22.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 064IWS1133B, the CPU 103 Checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 064IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS1134B). The process of step 064IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-22.

In the modified example 4, when the determination process of step 064IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, a case is shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display the off-design symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, the control may be configured to forcibly stop and display the off symbol only when the high probability / low base state (high probability flag is on and high base flag is off). In this way, any form may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly control the stop display with a detached symbol according to the current gaming state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

(Modification 5)
Further, in this example, depending on whether the left-handed operation is performed or the right-handed operation is performed, the decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the second special symbol. While switching whether to display the decorative symbol, the case where both the first small symbol and the second small symbol are continuously displayed is shown, but it is the period when the left-handed operation is performed or the right-handed operation is performed. Depending on the presence, the display of the first small symbol or the display of the second small symbol may be switched.

9-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of switching the display of the decorative symbol in the modified example 5. In FIGS. 9-59, the mode of switching the decorative symbol is the same as the mode shown in FIGS. 9-47. In this example, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-59 (1) and the right column of FIG. 9-59 (2), the state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the left-handed operation is performed. In the case of, the second small symbol display area 064IW012 is erased based on the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command, and only the display of the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 064IW011 is displayed. The state can be switched. Further, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-59 (1), the left column of FIG. 9-59 (2), and FIG. 9-59 (3), the right column is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state. When the striking operation is performed, the first small symbol display area 064IW011 is erased and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 064IW012 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command. You can switch to the state where only is displayed.

(Modification 6)
In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the case where the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted is shown, but it is configured to send the right-handed lighting start designation command. You may. FIG. 9-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing in the modified example 6. In the modified example 6, the processes of steps 064IWS2010A to S2027A are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-20.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 064IWS2028A). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 064IWS2030A). The processes of steps 064IWS2031A to S2032A are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-20.

Further, in the modification 6, since the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted even when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the figure is shown when the small hit game is ended. In the small hit end processing shown in 9-29, the same processing as in step 064IWS2307 is executed, and a right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted.

FIG. 9-61 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 064IWS205) in the modification 6. In the modified example 6, the processes of steps 064IWS611 to S633, S634 to S637, and S638 to 666 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-33 to 9-36.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 064IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the small hit game state by confirming the small hit symbol in the variation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not the case is present (step 064IWS633X). Whether or not the small hit symbol is confirmed and controlled in the small hit game state in the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, receiving the small hit start designation command and the first. 1 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the small hit symbol is definitely displayed as the stop symbol of the small symbol. If the small hit symbol is confirmed and controlled in the small hit game state in the variation display of the first special symbol (Y in step 064IWS633X), the step 064IWS634 to S636 is not executed and the step is performed as it is. Move to 064IWS611.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 064IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the small hit game state by confirming the small hit symbol in the variation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not the case is present (step 064IWS637X). If the small hit symbol is confirmed and controlled in the small hit game state in the variation display of the first special symbol (Y in step 064IWS637X), the step 064IWS638 to S643 is not executed and the step is performed as it is. Move to 064IWS611.

According to the modification 6, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the effect control CPU 120 side. Is executed to determine that it is a small hit and control is performed so that the right-handed notification is not performed, and whether the decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is controlled so as not to switch.

As described above, according to the feature unit 064IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. A specific variable display pattern (for example, a second variation pattern) corresponding to the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). It is possible to determine a plurality of types of variable display patterns including # 09, # 12, # 13). In addition, a plurality of types of gaming states (for example, probability variation state, high base state) including a plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) are included. ) Is controllable, and the gaming state at the end of the variable display corresponding to the control to the advantageous state differs depending on whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) after the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to control the game state (for example, after the end of the big hit game based on the 2R probability change big hit, if the big hit game is in the probability change state or the high base state before the start of the big hit game, it becomes the high probability / low base state (second KT state). If it is controlled and the probability / low base state is low before the start of the big hit game, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (first KT state)). Further, in the variable display corresponding to the control to the advantageous state executed after a specific period (for example, the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state) among the periods controlled to the predetermined state, A special variable display pattern (for example, the first variation) in which the variable display period is shorter than the specific variable display pattern as compared with the variable display executed within the specific period (for example, the 1st to 49th variations in the low probability / high base state). Patterns # 07 to # 09 and second fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16) are determined at a high rate. Therefore, by using the special variable display pattern having a short variable display period, it becomes difficult to start the variable display of the other identification information until the variable display by the special variable display pattern is completed, and the change in the gaming state is taken into consideration. Appropriate control can be achieved.

For example, in this example, in the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state, the lighting extension flag is set at the start of the fluctuation, and the high base state is maintained until the end of the fluctuation. Therefore, when the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high probability / low base state (second KT) after the jackpot game ends based on the high base state at the end of the fluctuation. It will be controlled by the state). However, in this example, if the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is interrupted and started in the middle of the final fluctuation, the lighting extension flag is reset in the middle of the final fluctuation and the low base state is reached. At the end of the fluctuation, the base state becomes low, and after the big hit game ends, only the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is entered, and a situation occurs in which the profit from the small hit game cannot be obtained. Therefore, in this example, by configuring the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state to be short, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is interrupted in the middle of such final fluctuation, and the player It makes it possible to prevent situations where the expected profits are not obtained.

In this example, fluctuation patterns with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds (first fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 09, second fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16) are uniformly used in the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state. Although the case has been shown, not limited to such an embodiment, even the final variation may be configured to determine the variation pattern of the variation time of 5 seconds or more. Even in such a configuration, if the final fluctuation (50th fluctuation) is configured to determine a fluctuation pattern of a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate than that of the 1st to 49th fluctuations. Good.

In this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time is determined in the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, for example, the last in the low probability / high base state. It may be configured so as to facilitate the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time over the 4 fluctuations and the 5 fluctuations of the above, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, according to this feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control the state (second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information (for example, the decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, in response to the transition of the gaming state, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 064IW017) is displayed in the display area for executing the variable display of the effect identification information, and the visibility of the effect identification information is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of the transition of the game state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased as compared with the non-predetermined state (for example, a low base state). , A special effect (for example, a shutter effect image 064IW017 shown in FIGS. 9-46) for displaying a special image (for example, shutter effect image 064IW017 shown in FIGS. 9-46) for notifying that the game state is changed with high visibility when the state is changed from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state. For example, the shutter effect) is executed, and when the special effect is executed, the effect identification information is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when shifting from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

Further, according to this feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control the state (second KT state). Further, the transition effect (for example, the shutter effect) can be executed when the state is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and the effect identification information is hidden and controlled when the transition effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when the effect identification information is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the non-display control of the effect identification information is started in response to the transition of the gaming state, and the effect is produced based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol). The control of hiding the identification information is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to display the effect identification information again while preventing a feeling of strangeness between the effect identification information and the game state.

In this example, as a predetermined condition, the case where the display of the decorative symbol or the hold display is restarted based on the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) from the start of hiding the decorative symbol or the hold display, the display of the decorative symbol or the hold display is restarted assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be configured.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the information related to the variable display can be stored as the hold storage, the hold display can be displayed corresponding to the hold storage, and the hold display is not displayed during the non-display control of the effect identification information. Set to the display state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the hold display in addition to the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to execute variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol)) in a reduced mode of the effect identification information, and the effect identification information. The reduced identification information is displayed regardless of whether or not the non-display control of is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game situation even during the non-display control of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Further, when the non-display control of the effect identification information is terminated, a combination of the effect identification information of the display result different from the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (2)). Switch the decorative pattern to the initial result and display it). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the control is performed in an advantageous state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, after executing the variable display of the effect identification information in response to the variable display of the first identification information, a specific condition (for example, transition to a probability variation state or a high base state) is satisfied. Based on this, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state (for example, the 50th fluctuation) is executed) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. The variable display of the effect identification information is executed. In addition, the display result is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the first identification information when the special condition is satisfied is supported. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (2), the decorative pattern is displayed by switching to the initial appearance). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of gaming states (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state, and a high base state). Further, the variable display of the first special identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second special identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the first special identification information can be performed. The first effect variable display that executes the variable display of the effect identification information (for example, the decorative pattern) correspondingly, and the second effect variable display that executes the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. Either one of the displays can be executed as a variable display. Further, based on the reception of the state transition information (for example, the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are displayed. Switching the variable display from one of them to the other (for example, switching to the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, and receiving the right-handed lighting end designation command. Switch to the display of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design based on this). Therefore, it is possible to switch the variable display from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other based on the reception of the state transition information, so that the processing load of the effect control can be reduced. it can.

For example, as shown in this example, in a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used. In order to switch which of the decorative symbols is displayed, it is necessary to monitor both the fluctuation state of the first special symbol and the fluctuation state of the second special symbol, which imposes a processing load on the effect control CPU 120 side. There is a risk that the number will increase and it will not be possible to smoothly switch the display of decorative patterns. Therefore, in this example, the display of the decorative symbol is switched based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command transmitted in connection with the change in the gaming state. It prevents the situation where the processing load is unnecessarily applied to the effect control CPU 120 side, and makes it possible to smoothly switch the display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, the display of the decorative symbol is switched based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command as the state transition information, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if a background specification command that can specify the game state is configured to be transmittable, the game state may be determined based on the reception of the background specification command as state transition information, and the display of the decorative symbol may be switched. Good. Further, for example, when a game state specification command capable of specifying the game state itself is configured to be transmitable, the game state is determined based on the reception of the game state specification command as state transition information, and the display of the decorative symbol is switched. It may be configured as follows. As such, various modes can be considered as the state transition information.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load especially when the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel.

In this example, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order of winning the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, this feature unit 064IW indicates. The configuration may be applied. Further, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the configuration shown by the feature unit 064IW may be applied.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , It is possible to control to a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)) in which the game value is easily given by the special state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the modification 5 of the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol)) in the reduced mode of the effect identification information. , Supports the first reduced variable display that executes the variable display of the reduced identification information in response to the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information based on the reception of the state transition information. The variable display is switched from one of the second reduced variable display for executing the variable display of the reduced identification information to the other (see, for example, FIGS. 9-59). Therefore, by making it possible to switch the variable display of the reduced identification information in response to the state transition information, it is possible to further reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) having lower visibility than the effect identification information is variably displayed by the variable display mode different from the effect identification information, and the state transition information is executed. The variable display of the special identification information is executed regardless of whether or not the special identification information is received. Therefore, even if the variable display of the effect identification information is switched, the game situation can be recognized.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, as state transition information, a game medium (for example, a game ball) is launched into a predetermined area (for example, a right area of the game area) in the game area. Based on the reception of predetermined operation information (for example, a right-handed lighting start designation command) indicating that, the variable display is switched from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other (for example,). Switch to the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command). Therefore, it is possible to use both the information indicating the situation in which the game medium is launched and the information corresponding to the transition of the game state, and it is possible to reduce the storage area of the information.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the given game value (for example, the number of prize balls) is totaled. In addition, the aggregation of the game value is started based on the reception of the predetermined operation information, and the game medium is launched into a specific area (for example, the left area of the game area) other than the predetermined area in the game area. The aggregation of the game value is terminated based on the receipt of the specific operation information (for example, the right-handed lighting end designation command) indicating the situation. Therefore, it is possible to manage the aggregation of the game value triggered by the reception of information indicating the situation in which the game medium is launched.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 064IW017) is displayed in a display area for executing variable display of the effect identification information in response to the transition of the gaming state, and the effect identification information is visually recognized. Decrease sex. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of the transition of the game state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, after executing the variable display of the effect identification information in response to the variable display of the first special identification information, a specific condition (for example, transition to a probability variation state or a high base state) is satisfied. Based on the above, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final fluctuation in the low probability / high base state (for example, the 50th fluctuation) is executed) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. The variable display of the effect identification information is executed. In addition, the variable display of the first special identification information when the special condition is satisfied is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information when the specific condition is satisfied. Display the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-47 (2), the decorative pattern is displayed by switching to the initial appearance). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special identification information is increased as compared with the non-predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a predetermined state in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special identification information is increased.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , Sends state transition information (for example, right-handed lighting start specification command, right-handed lighting end specification command). In addition, state transition information is not transmitted when controlled to a special state in a non-predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of the variable display switching control of the effect identification information and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the modification 6 of the feature unit 064IW, the state transition information is transmitted even when the special state is controlled in the non-predetermined state. Further, even if the state transition information is received, if it is controlled to a special state in a non-predetermined state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are not switched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in the control load on the information transmitting side, prevent unnecessary execution of the variable display switching control of the effect identification information, and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a missing symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information is a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) even though the state has shifted to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot will be forcibly removed. Therefore, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 064IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), and the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game is resumed. You may. It suffices as long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control the specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific region (for example, V region 064IW104) when the control is performed in the advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 9-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-56 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-56 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-57, 9-). 58). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 9-57 and 9-58). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state). For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first start area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the movement path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the movement path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-45 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-45 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 064IW, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when the small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special When the variable display of the symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is given, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed. It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-45 (1) and (2) are lit) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 064IW007 shown in FIG. 9-45 (1)) with high possibility. Further, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-45 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the control is performed in the special state. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-45 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 9-45 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained). , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach out-of-reach symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. On top of that, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the strategy measures against the gaming machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It is provided with an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the gaming area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 064IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are lit. The right-handed display 064IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display 064IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 064IW007 as shown in FIG. 9-45 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-45 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-45 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-3 and 9). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 064IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, as special states, there are a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 064IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 064IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 064IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 064IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. The number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 064IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 064IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-4), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the variable display display result is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 064IW with a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the gaming machines shown in the following (means A1) to (means A6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, a variable display execution means including a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a small hit game state). Is the identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of the identification information is being executed. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues. (Executed), the second control (for example, the outlier symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the first special symbol or the first special symbol)) that derives and displays the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, the outlier symbol). The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol))), and the first control and the second control are performed according to the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A, S1134B, and S1135B depending on the determination result of steps 064IWS1133A and S1133B. In the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is based on the determination results of steps 064IWS1132A and S1132B. Therefore, steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A, S1134B, and S1135B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A, S1134B, and S1135B according to the determination results of steps 064IWS1135C and S1135D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 064IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 064IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the derivation and display of the first specific display result. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of means A1 to means A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A control means (for example, a portion for executing step 064IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means is a specific area (for example, a portion) when controlled to an advantageous state. Based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the V region 064IW104), it is possible to control the game to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 064IWS2404. (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 9-11 (2). As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any of means A1 to means A4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). The variable display executing means can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS64A and S64B (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4), which is a variable display of the first identification information and a second specific display result. While the variable display corresponding to is being executed, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a modified example). In 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS1134A and S1135A when N in step 064IWS1133A. See FIG. 9-56 (B)), and the second identification information is variable. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed with the predetermined display result. Control for derivation and display is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 064IWS1131B to S1133B. FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56. (E) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to means A5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 064IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and the first identification information when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 064IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 064IWS1134A, S1135A is executed. See FIGS. 9-57 and 9-58), the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable when controlled to the non-specific state. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 064IWS1134A and S1134B when N in steps 064IWS1131A and S1131B. -57, see FIG. 9-58.). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the variable display display result is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 064IW with a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the gaming machines shown in the following (means B1) to (means B6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU 103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display display result. For example, a variable display execution means including a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a small hit game state). Can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4.), Variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control (for example, the first fluctuation time) in which the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of The update of the timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example,). The second control (for example, the missing symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol)) is performed. It is feasible, and which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically). CPU103) is step 064IW Steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A, S1134B, and S1135B are executed according to the determination results of S1133A and S1133B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A, S1134B, and S1135B according to the determination results of steps 064IWS1132A and S1132B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A, S1134B, and S1135B according to the determination results of steps 064IWS1135C and S1135D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 064IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 064IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the derivation and display of the first specific display result. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to means B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A control means (for example, a portion for executing step 064IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means has a specific area (for example, for example) when it is controlled in an advantageous state. Based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the V region 064IW104), it is possible to control the game to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 064IWS2404. (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 9-11 (2). As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 064IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to the means B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends). The variable display executing means is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set to N in step 064IWS1133A, and steps 064IWS1134A, S1135A. 9-56 (B)), a special display in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)). Does not perform the processing of steps 064IWS1131B to S1133B. See FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56 (E)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to the means B5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 064IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and the first identification information when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 064IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 064IWS1134A, S1135A is executed. See FIGS. 9-57 and 9-58), the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable when controlled to the non-specific state. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 064IWS1134A and S1134B when N in steps 064IWS1131A and S1131B. -57, see FIG. 9-58.). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In this example, a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening is provided, and the frequency of winning the variable winning ball device 6B during a high base state is increased to increase the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol. The case where the second special symbol and the second small symbol are the main symbols in the high base state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device having a first starting winning opening is provided, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by increasing the winning frequency of the variable winning ball device as the first starting winning opening during a high base state. It may be configured to be more frequent. Then, in the high base state, the first special symbol and the first small symbol may be configured to be the main symbol, and the configuration shown by the feature unit 064IW may be applied.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and
The advantageous state includes a specific state in which the variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be executed than in the normal state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and the normal state that can be controlled after the specific state ends. State control means that can control multiple types of game states,
An effect execution means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information of either the first identification information or the second identification information.
With
The effect executing means is
In the normal state, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed in response to the variable display of the first identification information, and in the specific state after the advantageous state controlled based on the variable display of the first identification information, the first 2 In response to the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed, and after the specific state ends , the variable display of the first identification information is supported based on the control to the normal state. Execute variable display of production identification information,
The come from a particular state to perform the variable display of the first identification information when it is controlled to the normal state, a variable of the effect identification information in the variable display of the first identification information was to be controlled to the specific state A gaming machine characterized in that the effect identification information is displayed so as to show a display result different from the display result of the display.

Images